2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner`s Manual

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT Owner`s Manual
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK742-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisfor on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
four-wheel drive vehicle.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis- assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . .
. . . . . .19
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .20
. . . . . .21
. . . . . .22
. . . . . .22
. . . . . .22
. . . . . .23
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .24
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .25 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .56
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .57
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .58
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .73
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
tion).
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
Emergency Key Removal
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these Replacement Keys
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
two seconds.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
CAUTION!
as possible by an authorized dealer.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unatCAUTION!
tended.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
position.
problems and loss of security protection.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause underized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
sired operation.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
authorized dealer.
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
Customer Key Programming
locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle SecuProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
performed at an authorized dealer.
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minGeneral Information
utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previStarting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
position.
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
NOTE:
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
NOTE:
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door couryour absence, the horn will sound three times and the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
ther information.
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights With Remote Key
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Programming Additional Transmitters
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior performed at an authorized dealer.
lights will turn on.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
NOTE:
•
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
which will deal with their disposal.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
General Information
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans•
mitter may reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
RKE PANIC button not pressed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
To Enter Remote Start Mode
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
will run for 15 minutes.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
in the Remote Start mode.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a NOTE: “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
third cycle.
display in the EVIC until you press the start button. Refer
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
further information.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote feature will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through the
Start request.
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® System. For more
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
2
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
Power Door Lock Switch
1. Open the rear door.
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the vehicle and the driver’s door is open, the doors will
not lock.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
door handle.
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reKEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
sponse time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Transmitter In Vehicle
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF. equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will To Lock The Liftgate
open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
Transmitter is required.
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the
electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will
unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
2
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The win• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
NOTE:
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
The power window switches remain active for up to ten down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” moveminutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
direction and release the switch.
WARNING!
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
Auto Down Window Switches
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto Up Window Switches
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button again.
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic
liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when
you press the electronic liftgate release. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear To Lock The Liftgate
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate release.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To Know Before Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pressing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by NOTE:
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftrear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
gate trim panel.
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
power liftgate functionality.
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)
WARNING!
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your During power operation, personal injury or cargo
Instrument Panel⬙.
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
(0 km/h).
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
full open position.
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disIf anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
engage to allow manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
meets sufficient resistance.
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manuThere are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
ally.
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power Some of the most important safety features in your
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a vehicle are the restraint systems:
detection of an obstruction.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
wheel
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant CHildren (LATCH).
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position severity and type of collision.
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjustHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
Please pay close attention to the information in this
buckled up in a rear seat.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
between you and the door.
their arm.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed positor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
Driver
Center
Passenger
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
Second
Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on • N/A — Not Applicable
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into posi• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
tion.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortfeature for each seating position.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
the occupant’s chest.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
These devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Energy Management Feature
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
2
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half.
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
NOTE:
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
AHR In Reset Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
deactivating BeltAlert®.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Knee Bolster below the glove
compartment.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC Air Bag System Components
air bags, are located above the side windows and their Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Air Bag Warning Light
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
• Steering Wheel and Column
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering • Knee Impact Bolsters
column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the glove
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
compartment.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
protection.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
severity and type of impact.
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Knee
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides depending on several factors, including the severity and
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system including some that may produce substantial vehicle
required for this vehicle.
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
WARNING!
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
air bag system immediately.
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are dewheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
collision.
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
milliseconds.
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate (SABIC) Inflator Units
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very During collisions where the impact is confined to a
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
especially applies to children.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onecolumn. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followvehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of ing functions:
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
until the ignition key is turned off.
deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
Front And Side Impact Sensors
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
removed.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
• Unlock the doors automatically.
events.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
structions for cleaning.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Child Restraints
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuanchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
2
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
to allow more room for the car seat.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWARNING!
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
tions to attach a tether anchor.
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Belt
Restraints in this Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
ALR / Anchor Locations
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the following
table(s) and the following sections for more information
about both types of seat belts.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the car seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
path.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
vehicle seat.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Transporting Pets
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
panel.
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts Door Latches
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
Fluid Leaks
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Tires
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .159
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
. . . . . . .163
. . . . . . .164
. . . . . . .165
. . . . . . .165
. . . . . . .166
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .167
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .168
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .179
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .181
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED. .183
▫ Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect® 5.0 If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect®
8.4/8.4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED
CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .192
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .193
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .199
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ ACC Operation at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .203
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .205
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .208
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .212
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . .
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .217
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . .
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . .
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
. . . .219
. . . .220
. . . .220
. . . .221
. . . .224
. . . .225
. . . .226
. . . .226
PARK ASSIST
. . . . . . . . . .229
. . . . . . . . . .229
. . . . . . . . . .230
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .234 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .244
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .234
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .245
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .236
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .249
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .253
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .254
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .259
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .259
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .266
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .280
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1 button
on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to located on the bottom of the mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Assist Call
9-1-1 Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button 1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror;
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
one of several predefined locations for immediate supthere will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
port:
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con- Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance Phone Screen . Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Moconnection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made;
bile features.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
vehicle issues.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call;
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• the vehicle brand; and
• the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red;
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”; and,
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The ORC turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
ORC system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact;
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash;
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash;
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed;
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility;
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator;
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • Wireless network congestion;
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but • Weather; and
are not limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active;
• The ignition key is in OFF position;
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
three detent positions:
area which can cause excessive drag.
• Full forward position
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addithe visors.
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on the sun.
automatically.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Equipped
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programdriver is alerted using both the visual and audible mable Features — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings ” in “Unalarms, including reducing the radio volume.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approis also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
muted.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio is also muted.
SEATS
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
the appropriate visual alert only.
vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
3
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas- the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control have reached the desired position.
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
when the desired position has been reached.
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Passenger’s Power Seat
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
the switch will raise and lower the position of the Adjustment
support.
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 — If
Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
to operate.
the Uconnect® display.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN —
If Equipped
There are two heated seat soft-keys that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Uconnect® display.
within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time within two to five minutes.
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
to shut the heating elements OFF.
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
located on the rear of the center console.
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped
3
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
To operate the system, press the “Controls” soft-key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
seats to operate.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” vented seat soft-key
once to select HI-level ventilation. Press the vented Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. On models that are equipped with remote start, the
Press the vented soft-key a third time to shut off the seat driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
ventilation.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compoVehicle” for further information.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecHead Restraints
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
by restricting head movement in the event of a reartrim, the back half being decorative plastic.
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
WARNING!
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
The head restraints for all occupants must be propextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Repying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vejusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a hicle” for further information.
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
3
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
Rear Head Restraint
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
3
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
Memory Seat Switch
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
following:
memory position has been set.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
to the ON/RUN position.
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre[if equipped], and radio station presets).
sets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
Programming The Memory Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- ProgramPARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
memory profile.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory formation.
feature can be enabled through the Uconnect® system To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followscreen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — ing:
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Enter-N-Go™).
Transmitter To Memory
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
NOTE:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release Driver One Memory Position Recall
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
the memory switch.
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE • To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
transmitter in Step 4.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
the steering column stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the ignition
into the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
vehicle.
or Easy Entry.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ”
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. The programmable settings are
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
available in the in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati- NOTE:
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
• If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
replaced, the automatic high beam mirror must be
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
authorized dealer.
section for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayof vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
section for further information.
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
function improperly.
The automatic high beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
To Deactivate
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
operation of low beams).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the direction the vehicle is steering.
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
NOTE:
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
The headlight delay time is programmable in the
sequence of rotations.
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Program• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inthe vehicle is moving forward.
formation.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
headlights are required during the day.
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Interior Lights
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
3
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the cycles, then turn off.
intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
shield.
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
for further information.
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect® 5.0 If
Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 95 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
the Uconnect® display.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Heated Steering Wheel ” soft-key once to turn Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
ON the heated steering wheel. Press the soft-key a second
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
time to turn the heated steering wheel OFF.
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
Heated Steering Wheel With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 95 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
the Uconnect® System.
steering wheel to operate.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM will appear indicating what speed was set. An
indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
on vehicle configuration).
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display To Accelerate For Passing
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
on vehicle configuration).
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph moderate hills is normal.
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you apply the brakes.
To Activate
• When the parking brake is set.
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE- “ACC Ready.”
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle •
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
•
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
•
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
•
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/
OFF button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than 2 pressing the SET + button.
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the set speed • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
until the button is released. The increase in set speed is
will automatically slow the vehicle.
reflected in the EVIC display.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
pressing the SET - button.
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
will release the vehicle brakes 2 seconds after coming
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
to a full stop.
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
If the SET - button is continually pressed, the set speed • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downreflected in the EVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainNOTE:
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
exceeds normal range (overheated).
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
the sensor.
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
• The distance setting is changed.
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi- The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howcator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of necessary.
the set speed.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
ACC system applies the brakes.
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle ahead.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it and the brakes will ramp-out. Driver intervention will be
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location required at this moment.
with left hand drive traffic.
ACC Operation at Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within 2 seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will rampEVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster.
out. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
The information it displays depends on ACC system
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a status.
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
five seconds of no ACC display activity
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional informaconditions temporarily limit system performance.
tion refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as Mode” in this section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC /
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC / FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
display “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC / FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW
temporarily occur.
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
examine the windshield and the camera located on the functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising
speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode,
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
To change between the different cruise control modes, To Set A Desired Speed
press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
(Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL
ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired
(Fixed Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will
speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
Speed) Cruise Control mode.
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If
the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release
the button when the desired speed is reached, and the
new set speed will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the
you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set
the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the button is released. The decrease in
increments until the button is released. The increase in set
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel
To Turn Off
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
memory if:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• You press the CANCEL button.
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON/OFF button.
• You turn off the ignition.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
button.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
• The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
FCW Message
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
warnings by braking and the system determines that the in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not message will be deactivated.
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Turning FCW ON Or OFF
misuse of the system, after 4 Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should The forward collision button is located on the switch
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the panel below the Uconnect® display.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
off).
Settings With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System Screen — If
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system Equipped.
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active
in front of you.
Braking:
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
the Uconnect® display.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from 3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or Near
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
soft-key for your desired preference.
5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the setting.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
Braking:
avoid a possible collision.
1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the lower
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
right side of the Uconnect® system.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
NOTE:
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or Near
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
soft-key for your desired preference. Then press the
driver after ignition shut down.
back arrow.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
Settings With Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen — If
Equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, Service FCW Warning
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
higher rate of speed.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens.
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. EQUIPPED
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
Once the condition that limited the system performance
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
authorized dealer.
recommendations.
FCW Limited Warning
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Sensors
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
changed to the ON/RUN position.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or direction, depending on the location, type and orientaabove. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper- tion of the obstacle.
ating speed, a warning will appear in the EVIC indicating ParkSense® Warning Display
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
the park assist ready system status.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENblink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
System
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per authorized dealer.
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
NOTE:
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operFailure to do so can result in the system not working
ating properly.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® operating speed. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will
appear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle is above
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your InstruPark Assist Ready
ment Panel” for further information.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
ParkSense® Display
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
3
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than 79
in (200 cm)
Greater than 47
in (120 cm)
None
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
No
WARNING
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
4th Solid
Yes
ALERTS
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
Slow (for rear
only)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
3rd Solid
Yes
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
will not be accessible from the EVIC.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the
through ignition cycles.
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
ParkSense® switch.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
disable the system, the instrument cluster will will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display a
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
EQUIPPED
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center
of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect®
5.0
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview® OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
indicate the system is turned ON.
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn
the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
Overhead Console
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
door may open and close while you are programming.
not release the button.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
and observe the indicator light.
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programfollow all remaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition OFF Operation
open.
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
Wind Buffeting
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Elecpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Setears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underwindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open and stop auto- Closing Power Shade — Express
matically at the half-open position. Press the shade
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
switch rearward again and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
second and the shade will open automatically to the
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
full-open position. This is called “Express Open”. During
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
switch will stop the shade.
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
The shade will open and stop automatically at the will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch completely.
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Power Shade — Express
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruccondition until the switch is pushed and held forward tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
again.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half seca Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of Wind Buffeting
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
opening to the Vent position.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Pinch Protect Feature
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- minimize the buffeting or open any window.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Venting Sunroof — Express
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- the battery and powered at all times.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this fea• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
ture.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Sunroof Fully Closed
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
area.
3
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload CUPHOLDERS
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once located in the center console.
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
CD/DVD Player — If Equipped
Lower Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
Press And Release
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be available.
3
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Bin
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
3
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mulRotating the center portion upward once more
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
will activate the washer pump which will conThe rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
located at the middle of the lever.
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
position.
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxispecifically for this roof rack system.
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo • If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the • The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
MOPAR® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .287
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .288
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .301
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On Message —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .315
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0/8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Blu-Ray Player Remote Control –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .341
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .341
䡵 Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .351
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .354
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Blu-ray™ Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .363
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .372
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
8. Speedometer
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Indicates vehicle speed.
lights are on.
9. Selectable EVIC Information
6. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informaThis area of the cluster will display selectable informa- tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informafurther information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners manual for more information.
manual for more information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sigan onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
monitors engine and automatic transmission conwill chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator — If
Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Parking
Brake system requires service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
12. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
13. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apshould be checked monthly when cold and
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
inspected by an authorized dealer.
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tion.
tires.)
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiwhere the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
the ON/RUN position.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
(EVIC) When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information CenThe odometer display shows the total distance the veter” of your owners manual for more information.
hicle has been driven.
17. Selectable EVIC Menu
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your menu. For further information, refer to “Electronic Veodometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair hicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your
technician should leave the odometer reading the same owners manual for more information.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
18. Air Bag Warning Light
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
must be reset at zero.
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” of your owners manual for further information.
16. Electronic Vehicle Information
Display/Odometer Display
Center
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
22. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful The system allows the driver to select information by
information by pressing the buttons mounted on the pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
wheel:
• Digital Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Radio Info
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• SRT
• 4WD Setup
• Driver Assistance
EVIC Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
• BACK Arrow Button
Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
• OK Button
The OK button may be used for the following:
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and Selection
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Reset (hold)
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
Clearing (hold)
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
7. Selectable Gauge 2
8. Selectable Gauge 1
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
The main display area will normally display the main
cluster and consists of eight sections:
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnnon critical warnings, red for critical warnings and ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa- • Five Second Stored Messages
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
4. Telltales/Indicators
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDS)
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On”.
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
upon your personal driving style.
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
• Five Second Unstored Messages
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message takes control of the main display area for five
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
within 10 seconds.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
lowing procedure.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Messages
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
within 10 seconds.
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
OFF/LOCK position.
• Service Airbag System
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
• Traction Control Off
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
• Washer Fluid Low
not start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Oil Pressure Low
• Brake Fluid Low
• Oil Change Due
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Fuel Low
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Lights On
• Cruise Off
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Ready
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Doors Open
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Gear Not Available
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Paddle Shift Mode Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Automatic Unavailable Use Paddle Shift Mode Service
Required
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Transmission
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
steering wheel, heated or cooled cup-holder, rear defroster and heated mirrors, heating and air conditioning,
power inverter, audio and telematics system.
This condition is temporary and recoverable, this is for
driver information only.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the EVIC Amber Telltales
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellmiddle, and red telltales on the left.
tales. These telltales include:
Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On Message — • Low Fuel Telltale
If Equipped
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
When the ⬙Battery Saver Mode⬙ or “Battery Saver On⬙
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
message is displayed, the vehicle will turn off certain fuel is added.
electrical functions to reduce battery energy consumption. This will occur during periods when the battery is • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
not being adequately charged. During this time, the
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windfollowing features (if equipped) may be turned off or will
shield washer fluid is low.
operate at a reduced power level: heated seats and heated
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authooff the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
rized dealer.
four minutes when this light turns on.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
light will come on when the ignition is first
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
possible.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
• Charging System Light
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veIf the light remains lit with the engine running, your
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may • Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
require towing.
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Steering is not operating and needs service.
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- • Liftgate Ajar
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
may be ajar.
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
EVIC Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
sub-menus and press the OK button to change the
display between Digital Speedometer or Analog
Speedometer.
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Vehicle.”
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be disPress and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until played. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the through the information sub-menus and press the OK
EVIC.
button to select or reset the following resettable submenus:
Digital Speedometer
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Only
button until the Digital display icon is high- Oil Temp
lighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the Oil Pressure
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life
Multimeter
Engine Hours
Tire Pressure
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Trip A
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip A information will display the
following:
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the • Distance
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different • Average Fuel Economy
color than the other tire pressure value.
• Elapsed Time
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Pressure System” is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Trip B
Fuel Economy
From the Trip A menu press and release the
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Left or Right arrow button until the Trip B icon
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right
highlighted.
to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip B informa• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
tion will display the following:
L/100 km with Bargraph)
• Distance
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel Economy
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
• Elapsed Time
Audio
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1/8 Mile
SRT
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the performance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Launch Mode – If Equipped
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “SRT” appears in the EVIC, then press
and release the RIGHT arrow button to cycle through the
features. Press the OK button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• Braking Distance
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at • The word “READY” will display when conditions are
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will appear
met for the event to begin.
when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
• The screen will revert back to “Please come to a
the event is taking place.
complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehicle fails to reach
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com• The time will continue to display until the OK button
plete stop.
is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop.
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to
Braking Distance
display until the conditions are met for another event
to be recorded.
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was • Pressing the OK button will clear the current run and
depressed.
prepare the cluster to record a new run.
• This feature will only function when applying the 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature. vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 25 seconds.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph • Pressing and holding the OK button for five seconds
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will display when
will clear the peak force values.
conditions are met for the event to begin.
Launch Mode – If Equipped
• 0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
(1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.
line racing.
• The time will continue to display until the vehicle is
1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface
brought to a stop.
with the engine running.
Instantaneous G-Force
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
(lateral and longitudinal).
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.
Peak G-Force
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
NOTE: If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all • Launch Mode is not available until the 500 mile
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
break-in has been achieved.
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
Screen Setup
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
6. Release the brake pedal.
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
Pressing the launch control button when launch control is
OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
active will deactivate launch control.
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
NOTE:
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and that information is displayed.
waits for the driver to release the brake. Launch Mode Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled
wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first Odometer
gear.
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac • Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
Modes.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Left
Upper Right
• None
• None
• Compass
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Current Gear: ON/OFF
• Time
• Current Gear
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Gear Display
• Average MPG/L/100km
• Time
• Current MPG/L/100km
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Trip A
• Average MPG/L/100km
• Trip B
• Current MPG/L/100km
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Cancel
• Okay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
turn the screen on.
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
5.0/8.4 Settings
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the or down through the available settings.
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable Display
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
will be available.
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup. • Display Mode
Soft-Keys
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
time.
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
arrow back soft-key.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Units
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
soft-key.
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Length
soft-key.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re• Set Language
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
to return to the previous menu.
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Touchscreen Beep
Clock
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a previous menu.
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Minutes
Safety / Assistance
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
• Time Format
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
When in this display, you may select the time format means the system will warn you of a possible collision
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, touch and release the Near or Far button.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
Vehicle”.
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
start point. To make your selection, touch the Lane
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
Departure Warning soft-key, until a check-mark appears
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
previous menu.
your selection, touch the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking soft-key, until a • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the Equipped
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With MitigaThe amount of directional torque the steering system can
tion” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft- • Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
key until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
• ParkSense®
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
ParkSense® Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkvehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or • Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operequipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
ating information.
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your
selection, touch the ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Paddle Shifting
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make
your selection, touch the Paddle Shifting soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &
Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is soft-key to return to the previous menu.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Static
Gridlines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the
“Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” soft-key to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Brake Service
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in motion.
When this feature is selected, it will allow the service of
the rear brake components. To make your selection touch
the Brake Service soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Auto Park Brake
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatiWhen this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) cally set the Park Brake when the vehicle is shifted to
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control park. To make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
previous menu.
• Hold ’n Go™
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatically hold its position when it comes to a stop To make When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
your selection, touch the Hold ’n Go™ soft-key, until a in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apcheck-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
setting had been selected. Touch the back row soft-key to The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
return to the previous menu.
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softLights
key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
will be available.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate Equipped
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Lights / SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
• Flash Headlights With Lock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Sound Horn With Lock
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
return to the previous menu.
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is procheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the grammed, touching the handle more than once will only
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key result in the driver’s door opening. If Driver’s Door first
to return to the previous menu.
is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
(or use RKE transmitter).
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passive Entry
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
hicle”.
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
• Horn With Remote Start
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperaarrow back soft-key.
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated • Headlight Off Delay
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folreturn to the previous menu.
lowing settings will be available.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
• Engine Off Power Delay
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the followWhen this feature is selected, the power window
ing settings will be available.
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials, such as iPod’s, Mobile
Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors, away from the top
of the instrument panel where the compass module is
Compass Variance Map
located. These materials can cause interference with the
• Perform Compass Calibration
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
will be available.
back soft-key.
Audio
• Balance/Fade
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
Fade settings.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
• Equalizer
back soft-key.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – • AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
soft-key.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, touch the AUX Volume Match SiriusXM Setup
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
back soft-key.
settings will be available:
• Loudness — If Equipped
• Channel Skip
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the Loudness soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the fol- • Subscription Information
lowing settings will be available:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
• Paired Devices
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
/ Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the
the Subscription Information screen in order to reUconnect® Supplement Manual.
subscribe.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Clear Personal Data
scription Information screen.
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings soft-key
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To the following settings will be available:
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on • Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online.
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Perand is available for U.S. residents only.
sonal Data touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check mark
will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the following SRT Performance Features
settings will be available:
To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the
Uconnect® “APPS” soft-key then touch the “SRT Perfor• Restore Settings
mance” soft-key. Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock, through the features. Press the feature soft-key to select
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the that feature.
settings to their default setting touch the Yes or No
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
• Timers
• Engine Values
• Digital Gauge Displays
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile (200 meter)
• 1/4 Mile (400 meter)
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter), 1/4 Mile
(400 meter)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h), 1/8
mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile (400 meter).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is G-Force
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
• Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
times recorded.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking the peak forces will continue to display.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
Gauges 1
depressed.
Braking Distance
• This feature will only function when applying the When selected, this screen displays the following values:
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Oil Temperature
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com- gauge.
plete stop.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Battery Voltage
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range
of the gauge.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Oil Temperature
Engine
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
the gauge.
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph),
gauge.
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and
gear selector values.
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature within the Handling
range of the gauge.
When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering
and yaw angles.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Options
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
When selected, this screen allows you to choose a standard or customize display for your SRT home page.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
into the USB port.
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and operation.
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc Player, the
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
icon will be present on the Player.
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pressing the Power button on the remote control.
Getting Started
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BluRay Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
4
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger’s side).
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphone Channel Selector
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Blu-ray™ Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray player is located in the center console.
To view a Blu-ray insert the disc into the Blu-ray disc
Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Bluray disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does
not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Blu-ray disc Player follow these steps:
Using the Touchscreen Radio
4
Blu-ray player location
Rear Media Control Screen
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the Media soft-key, then touch the Rear Media Play Video Games
soft key.
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA/
• Touch the OK soft-key to begin playing the Blu-ray HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using the Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
then press the source key and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
directly from a video camera, connect video games for Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 Radio
player.
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray disc with the label facing as
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray disc player. The radio
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
audio/video jacks:
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
1. HDMI Input
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
2. Right audio in (red)
rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Head3. Left audio in (white)
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
4. Video in (yellow)
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as PlaystaHeadphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter Using The Remote Control
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
information.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then press
1. Press the Media soft-key on the Uconnect® radio
ENTER/OK.
touchscreen.
2. Touch the Rear Media soft-key to display the Rear
Media Control screen.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear
Seat Entertainment Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key, the select source soft-key and selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in
then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA column. To exit the upper corner will turn OFF the remote control screen
functions.
touch the X at the top right of the screen.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-Ray Player can play CDs, DVDs and Blu-Ray
Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
NOTE: Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while • Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
a DVD or Blu-ray disc is playing, brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as scene
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-Ray Player Remote Control – If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Press to enter Source Selection screen.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 – Press to navigate menus.
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone 6. SETUP – Press to access the screen settings menu.
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
7. 䉴䉴 – Press and hold to fast forward through the 16. 䉲 – Press to navigate menus.
current audio track or video chapter.
17. OK – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
18. 䉳 – Press to navigate menus.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Press to access Blu-Ray disc
19. 䉱 – Press to navigate menus.
features.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
10. POPUP/MENU – Press to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu ray popup menu, the DVD The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD – Press to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 – Press and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14. Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK – Press to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Channel Selection Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone 3. Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
selector switch.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the OK button to
select the new mode.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferBACK button on the remote control.
able.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
according to the polarity diagram shown.
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceUnwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Warranty
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email [email protected]
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® re- the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
the video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to
change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray player’s settings
of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Video Screen Display Settings
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (Blu-ray or DVD Video To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the screen closed:
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display • Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Close the video screen.
Disc Formats
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote The Blu-Ray player is capable of the playing the followcontrol’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se- ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
lect the next available audio mode without using the • BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
Mode/Source Select menu.
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
DVD-VR
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray player may not be able to play
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray player,
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
help avoid playback problems, use the following guideVideo title is ignored). All multi-channel program matelines when recording discs.
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
increase the volume level to account for this change in
closed are playable.
level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDdisc or to another mode.
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
Recorded Discs
each track number is unique.
DVD Audio Support
The Blu-ray player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
corded) are not supported.
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
begin playing the next available file.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
player will automatically skip the file and begin playThe Blu-ray player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
ing the next available file.
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The Blu-ray player always uses the file extension to
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
supported. For both formats, the recommended visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray player will return
Blu-ray player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file,
to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start
or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
of the first track.
previous file.
The Blu-ray player may shut down during extremely hot
• To change the current directory, use the remote conconditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperatrol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
ture is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the
Disc Errors
Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached.
This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the
If the Blu-ray player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Blu-ray player.
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, Product Agreement
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential This product incorporates copyright protection technolcauses for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured access the switches.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a after the current track begins to play.
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
each mode.
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
Radio Operation
precautions:
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Hard-Keys
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
4
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-Keys
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions
(Applies To Both Hard-Keys And Soft-Keys)
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
3. Recirculation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
indicator illuminates when ON.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
1. MAX A/C Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
turns off after 10 minutes.
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
CAUTION!
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to for warmer temperature settings.
the heating elements:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatically exit Sync.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth 8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Provides the passenger with independent temperature
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
soaking with warm water.
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
window cleaners on the interior surface of the cooler temperature settings.
window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
automatically exit Sync.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. SYNC
Soft-Key
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• Defrost Mode
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conselected, the blower level may will increase.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
12. Climate Control OFF Button
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount ON/OFF.
of air is directed through the defrost and side 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
window demister outlets.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con• Mix Mode
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the softdemist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
snowy conditions.
cooler temperature settings.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
area indicates cooler temperatures.
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the softkey temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
NOTE:
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
mance.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
is ON.
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate ConIn MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculawill cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink NOTE:
and then turn off.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Automatic Operation
comfort as quickly as possible.
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
units by selecting the Uconnect® customer2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Syssystem to maintain by adjusting the driver and pastem Settings” in this section of the manual.
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9, To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
comfort level.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation Override
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation consystem to function automatically.
trol.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .388
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .389
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
䡵 SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Active Damping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .409
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .429
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .432
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .451
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .440
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .442
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .444 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .455
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .470
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector
the engine starting, press the button again.
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
accelerator pedal.
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
display “ON/RUN”),
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
OFF position.
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will shifting out of PARK.
decrease as the engine warms up.
After Starting
WARNING!
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECO
mode is engaged.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
vehicle control systems will change the following:
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear
later.
(PRND) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the
• The torque converter clutch may engage at lower Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a
gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and
engine speeds and remain on longer.
move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or
• The overall driving performance will be more conser- to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
vative.
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this sec• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibtion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
ited based on temperature and other factors.
PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the first (or second)
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE: ECO mode is only available in AUTO mode.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in
the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will
toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do
not need to press the shift lever button when toggling
between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be
made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this
section for further information.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission shifter. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
CAUTION!
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until
it stops. When released, the lever will return to its
home position.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
(Continued)
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select TOW mode (refer to
⬙Selec-Trac®⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙) or use the
Paddle Shift switches (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using TOW mode or a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S)
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift
lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from
DRIVE.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will 5. Restart the engine.
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
indicate what actions may be necessary.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
operation.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomfollowing steps:
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en- diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired recur.
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
1. Stop the vehicle.
service is required.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, When To Use TOW Mode
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to
“Selec-Trac®” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift
mode is active, the current transmission gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Normally, in Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
reached. If, however, Paddle Shift is engaged while in
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
SPORT or TRACK mode, the transmission will remain
of a vehicle speed.
in the selected gear even when maximum engine
speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only • Holding the (-) paddle depressed will progressively
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
when commanded by the driver.
at the current speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
display the current gear.
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
fault or overheat condition is detected.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
vehicle is accelerated.
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again displayed in
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or off the accelerator pedal.
icy conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Trac® combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
5
Selec-Trac® Switch
Selec-Trac® consists of the following positions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
with improved handling and acceleration over a twowheel drive vehicle. The customer has the option of
going to partial ESC. The active suspension system
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
will be in Semi Firm mode, and a green flag will light • Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction
surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
up in the instrument cluster. The transmission will
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The
provide a more aggressive shifting pattern (Refer to
electronic brake controls are set to Partial OFF to limit
“Paddle Shift Mode” in “Starting And Operating” for
traction control management of throttle and wheel
further information). This feature will reset to AUTO
spin.
on an ignition cycle.
• The transmission will be in SPORT mode and pro• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
vide a more aggressive shifting pattern. Refer to
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
“Paddle Shift Mode” in “Starting And Operating”
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
for further information.
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
•
The customer has the option of going to FULL OFF
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
with no interaction from the ESC System. The active
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
suspension system will be in Full Firm mode.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
• This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im- • Tow – Use this mode for towing. Vehicle suspension
will go to Firm mode. Trailer sway control is enabled
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. The active suspension system will be in
Touring Mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
in the ESC system. The terrain switch will remain in Launch Mode — If Equipped
this position through an ignition cycle until the cus- This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
tomer cycles into another position.
line racing. To use Launch Mode please follow the steps
below:
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled 1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
with the engine running.
in many driving situations including cornering, accelera2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
tion and braking. There are 3 modes:
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
• Touring Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO
and SNOW) — Used during highway speeds where a 4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.
touring suspension feel is desired.
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
• Firm Mode (Available in terrain positions SPORT and
NOTE: If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all
TOW) — Provides a firm suspension for better hanconditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
dling.
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
• Full Firm (Available in TRACK mode) — Provides a second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience. speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Pressing the launch control button when launch control is Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
active will deactivate launch control.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and
waits for the driver to release the brake. Launch Mode
then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled
wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first
gear.
• Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac
Modes.
• Launch Mode is not available until the 500 mile
(805 km) break-in has been achieved.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
there is a problem with the power steering system.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
does not in any way damage the steering system.
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control Traction Control System (TCS)
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approWARNING!
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot preundersteer condition.
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo- resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inapprocated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
On
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
ESC OFF Switch
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would norgravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Full Off
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momenThis mode is available in TRACK mode only. Refer to
tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
“Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further
while the vehicle is in motion.
information. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability
features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode,
WARNING!
press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate,
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER butreduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the ton located on the instrument cluster to clear this mesenhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- sage. The “ESC OFF” message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
tem is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
tion. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mospeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authomentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
off or full off.
the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comtires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedthe sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading
Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
replaced.
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
5
Tire Rotation
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — When
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at
the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below 14
psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation.
In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of 50
miles (80 km). Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
at full capacity or towing a trailer.
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The value.
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the upCAUTION!
dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
been established for the tire size equipped on your
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
damage may result when using replacement equip(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperaAftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
to the sensors may result.
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
(Continued)
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
failure or condition.
the tire.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
Premium System — If Equipped
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure following components:
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message in the tire
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain graphic display screen with the pressure value(s) and the
low tire(s) “flashing.” or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to
the proper pressure.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
XXX⬙ message will also be displayed. Refer to “Electronic Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” or in a
different color on the graphic display to the vehicle’s
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
recommended cold tire pressure as shown in the ⬙Inflate
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
to XXX⬙ message. The system will automatically update,
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
“flashing,” or return to the original color and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
fault is detected possibly related an incorrect sensor
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
any of the following:
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically.
• There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare
tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
“flashing” or different color pressure value in the In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
graphic display. An ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message will still will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
be displayed.
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 6.4L Engine
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The 6.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
ing licenses:
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
United States
MRXC4W4MA4
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will proProblems that result from using gasoline containing
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
fuel system components.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher etha- More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
nol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Operate in a lean mode.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• Poor engine performance.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
E-85 perform the following:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the • Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the • Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
door.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
disengage snaps.
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the VEHICLE LOADING
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the Certification Label
fuel door latch to the closed position.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Release Cable
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
cle’s GVWR.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and Tire Size
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
Payload
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load Rim Size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
listed.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Inflation Pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Common Towing Definitions
supported by the scale.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
you in understanding the following information:
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
TRAILER TOWING
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Frontal Area
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
6.4L Automatic
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Rating)
12,600 lbs (5
40 sq. ft. (3.72 sq
7,200 lbs (3 265 kg)
715 kg)
m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
720 lbs (327 kg)
• Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend using the
run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
capacity or towing a trailer.
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Trailer And Tongue Weight
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire– Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
further information.
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
NOTE:
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maxi- • The weight of the driver and all passengers
mum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
(Continued)
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Requirements — Tires
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Tips
NOTE: To provide optimum towing performance and to
protect transmission components always select Trailer
Tow mode when towing a trailer. Before setting out on a
trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in
an area away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW mode, or
use the Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower
gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
TOW Mode
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over- • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
heating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
select a lower gear (using the Paddle Shift switches) on
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
more severe grades.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Paddle Shift Mode
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
• When using the Paddle Shift switches, select the
maximize fuel efficiency.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed.
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .475
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . .
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
. .486
. .486
. .488
. .490
. .492
. .493
. .496
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat
tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately 50
miles (80km) at 55 mph (88km/h). Tire service should be
obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
NOTE: This vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire.
The spare tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For
a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the front and use the
spare tire on the rear.
Spare Tire Label
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have a collision and be severely or fatally injured.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For more
information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “AddThe scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
ing Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” in this manual.
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Spare Tire Stowage
Jack Location
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Jack Storage Location
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel
and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
6
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
Jack And Tool Assembly
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Front Jacking Location
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
Stowed Spare
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
tray.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
road wheel in the cargo area.
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
6
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenNOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and the hood to assist in jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
WARNING!
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
6
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- Jump-Starting Procedure
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
the discharged battery.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
at your authorized dealer.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
6
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
(Continued)
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Release Latch
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
4. While the metal latch is the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until it clicks
and releases out of the park position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
6
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission and the armrest.
Release Latch
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
into position.
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for loading onto a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Stowed Position
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
• Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .500
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
7
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .551
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .546
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Washer Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
do the following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
not crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
• Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
Engine Oil Selection
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all Identification Symbol
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
This symbol means that the oil has
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
been certified by the American
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
manufacturer only recommends
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the requireAPI Certified engine oils.
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiUse Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent
tives.
MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Oil Viscosity
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomEngine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
• Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do
not attempt jump-starting because the battery
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
• Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of
the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubrimild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulacated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
tions of salt or road film.
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Coolant Checks
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
Adding Coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
engine cooling system.
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acpossible.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Cooling System Pressure Cap
the vehicle is operated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could recovery tank.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MSexpansion bottle must also be protected against freez12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
ing.
overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum compoized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
nents.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
maintenance intervals.
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
Selection Of Lubricant
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
used.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisadversely affect seals.
sion damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the disassembled for any reason.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Rad Fan
F10
Compressor for Air
Suspension - If
Equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
F11
Emission sensors
(Diesel engine only)
Diesel Fuel Heater
(Diesel engine only)
F12
F13
F14
F17
F20
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Body Controller /
Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric
Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3
/ Interior Lights
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4
/ Power Locks
Headrest Release If Equipped
Passenger Door
Module
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F28
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Engine Control
Module
Body Controller #1
F29
F30
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
F32
F34
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup
Lights - If
Equipped
F35
F36
F37
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Trailer Tow Parking
Lights - If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control
Module
Slip Differential
Control
Sunroof - If
Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower - If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity
F38
F39
F40
F42
F44
F46
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Power Inverter
115V AC - If
Equipped
Power Liftgate - If
Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights
Horn
F49
Diagnostic Port
Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
F50
20 Amp
Yellow
F51
10 Amp
Red
F52
5 Amp
Tan
20 Amp
Yellow
F53
Description
Integrated Central
Stack / Climate
Control
Air Suspension
Control Module - If
Equipped
Ignition Node
Module / Keyless
Ignition / Steering
Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left
Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F56
F57
F59
F60
F62
F63
F64
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cavity
Additional Content
(Diesel engine only)
Transmission
F66
Purging Pump
(Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Air Conditioning
Clutch
Ignition Coils
(Gas), Urea Heater
(Diesel)
Fuel Injectors /
Powertrain
F67
15 Amp
Blue
F68
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
F70
F71
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
Description
Sunroof / Passenger Window
Switches / Rain
Sensor
CD / DVD /
Bluetooth Handsfree Module - If
Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Cavity
F73
F74
F76
F77
F78
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
HID Headlamps
Right
Brake Vacuum
Pump - If
Equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control
Drivetrain Control
Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control
Module / Electric
Power Steering - If
Equipped
F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Description
Universal Garage
Door Opener /
Compass / AntiIntrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right
Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column
Control Module/
Cruise Control
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F86
F87
F88
F90/
F91
F92
F93
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Airbag Module
F94
Air Suspension – If
Equipped/ Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel
Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear
seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp
- If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
F95
F96
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
F97
25 Amp
Natural
F98
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Shifter / Transfer
Case Module
Rear Camera /
Park Assist
Rear Seat Heater
Switch / Flashlamp
Charger - If
Equipped
Rear Heated Seats
& Heated Steering
Wheel - If
Equipped
Front Heated Seats
- If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Cavity
F99
F100
F101
F103
F104
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Climate Control /
Driver Assistance
Systems Module
Active Damping If Equipped
Electrochromatic
Mirror/Smart High
Beams - If
Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel engine only)
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/
Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. Interior Bulbs
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Premium Headlamps (Low/
High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Premium Park/Turn Signal
Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Premium Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Premium Front Side Marker If Equipped
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Rear Body Side Turn Signal
Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
3157K
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
T20
7440NA (WY21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
P27/7W
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminHigh voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
seconds, as the system charges.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
bulb.
the housing.
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at 1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Authorized Dealer.
Dealer.
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
6.6 Liters
15.5 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils
that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT
3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .557
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified NOTE:
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintime since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
S driving. Inspection and service should also be done
illuminated.
C anytime a malfunction is suspected.
H
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
E The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
D time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
U
L On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
E
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichS equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disever comes first.
8 played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance At Each Oil Change
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Change the engine oil filter.
hicle” for further information.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
CAUTION!
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals Required Maintenance Intervals
as required.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6
N
T Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12
months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 559 M
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 18
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30
N
T Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561 M
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or 42
Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54
N
T Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563 M
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance SerE vice Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 M
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs. *
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not
apply.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
N
T 102 Months Maintenance SerE vice Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567 M
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (250 000 km)
whichever comes first.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
N
T 126 Months Maintenance SerE vice Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 M
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
N
T 150 Months Maintenance SerE vice Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
C
sign of irregular wear.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) or 120
months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .576
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .576
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .580
9
574 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
In Mexico Contact:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577
Mexico, D. F.
Service Contract
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
578 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
584 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .190
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .507
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .372
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
INDEX 585
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .261 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .106
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
10
586 INDEX
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .500
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .521
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.518
.520
.552
.518
.522
.519
.522
.523
.521
.521
.519
.530
.190
.267
.575
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
INDEX 587
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.388
.261
.279
.129
.409
.410
.411
.186
.411
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .295
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .500
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
10
588 INDEX
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .553
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
INDEX 589
Forward Collision Warning
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.214
.472
.490
.526
.449
.453
.452
.450
.388
.450
.449
.293
.452
.450
.449
.449
.552
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
10
590 INDEX
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.402
.472
.546
.546
.166
.175
.546
.130
.288
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Jacking Instructions .
. . .462 Jack Location . . . . .
. . .244 Jack Operation . . . .
. . .164 Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.478
.475
.478
.486
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
INDEX 591
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.14
.19
.18
.14
.17
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .416
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .289
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
10
592 INDEX
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .289
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.507
.503
.556
.289
.580
.159
.159
.159
.450
.121
.129
.129
.128
.130
.127
.121
INDEX 593
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10
594 INDEX
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .425
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .261
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.432
.521
.363
.361
.179
.526
.238
.138
.267
.219
.156
.278
.278
.145
INDEX 595
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .361
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .57
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
10
596 INDEX
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
INDEX 597
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .372
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .424
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .361
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
10
598 INDEX
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.439
.440
.418
.420
.433
.477
.437
.438
.418
.463
.492
.459
.470
.463
.470
.463
.470
.409
.417
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .244
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
INDEX 599
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK742-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
SRT
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement